Owners manual

ManualsBrandsLG Electronics ManualsCell PhoneGD900

ELECTRONICS INC.GD900

ﺮﺑﺭﺎﮐ یﺎﻤﻨﻫﺍﺭ

GD900 User Guideﺮﺑﺭﺎﮐ یﺎﻤﻨﻫﺍﺭ GD900

ﯽﺳﺭﺎﻓ

ENGLISH

ﯽﺳﺭﺎﻓ

P/N : MMBB0338633

(

1.0

)

www.lgmobile.com

P/N : MMBB0338633

(

1.0

)

www.lgmobile.com

Summary of content (202 pages)

PAGE 1
ENGLISH P/N : MMBB0338633 (1.0) G ‫ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬GD900 ELECTRONICS INC. www.lgmobile.com GD900 ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬ ENGLISH ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬ www.lgmobile.com GD900 User Guide P/N : MMBB0338633 (1.
PAGE 2
Bluetooth QD ID B015268
PAGE 3
‫ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 4
‫ﺣﺴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺧﺮﯾﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﮐﻢ ﺣﺠﻢ ‪ GD900‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺮﯾﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﯾﯿﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ‪ LG‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﯾﻦ ﻓﻦ ﺁﻭﺭی ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺳﯿﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﯾﺠﯿﺘﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 5
PAGE 6
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ‪8.......................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ‪10...............................‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪12...................................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ‪14.......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳌﺴﯽ ‪15.............................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪16........................‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ‪ GD900‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ ‪17..........................‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﯾﻊ‪18......................
PAGE 7
‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‪38................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﳕﺎﯾﺎﺏ ‪38...............................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ‪39....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ‪39..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪40.................................................
PAGE 8
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮ‪56................................................‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‪56...................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‪57...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰی‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ‪58.................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ ‪58.............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ ‪58.................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎ ‪59...................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﯾﺎﺏ ‪59........................
PAGE 9
‫‪73.................................................... Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪65‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‪75.................................................‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‪76 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‪77 ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‪77 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‪79.......‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫‪67‬‬ ‫‪67‬‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫‪69‬‬ ‫‪69‬‬ ‫ﻋﯿﺐ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ‪85...........................
PAGE 10
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮑﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ‬ ‫• ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﯾﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﻨﺪﮐﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺳﻨﮕﯿﻦ ﺭﻭی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﯾﺎ ﻧﺸﺴﱳ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳌﺴﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮑﯽ ‪ LCD‬ﻧﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ )ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪(USB‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪ ،USB‬ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺛﺒﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻏﯿﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‪ :‬ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‪ :‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭﺏ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ﺷﺴﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺏ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎ ﺑﯿﺎﻓﺘﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻃﻼﯾﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .
PAGE 13
‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﯾﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺳﻄﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﻭی ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﺒﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﯿﺎﻓﺘﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﮐﺶ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫‪ GD900‬ﺗﻌﺒﯿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﯾﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪ GD900‬ﺑﺎﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﯾﺎﺑﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ”ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﭘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ“‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭی‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﻻی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺟﺎ ﺑﯿﺎﻓﺘﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻃﻼﯾﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻣﻼﹰ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﯿﺮ ﺍﯾﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺑﯿﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﹰ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .
PAGE 16
‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺨﭽﻪ ﺍﺧﯿﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی‬ ‫‪Google‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪ | LG GD900‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺻ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﮔﺎﻟﺮی‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮ ‪FM‬‬ ‫ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺳﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﯾﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺴﻨﺞ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺪ
PAGE 17
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭی‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ GD900‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺟﺎی ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭی ﺧﻮﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻂ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ؛ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﯾﮏ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﯾﻢ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫• ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﯾﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﺑﺎ ‪ GD900‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﺮ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻓﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺯ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﯿﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﯾﻊ‬ ‫ﺻ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﮏ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻨ‬ ‫ﺑﺴ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﯿﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻋﺎﺩی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 21
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ‪،GD900‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﯿﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﯿﻤﺎﯾﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﯾﺎ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﯾﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻢ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮏ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 23
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻬﯿﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﯾﮏ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﯾﮏ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﯾﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﻭ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﹰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﯾﺪ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺪﻭﺭ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‪ :‬ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﯾﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ ،Divx‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ‬ ‫ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺑﻨﻮﯾﺴﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻮی ▲‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺑﻨﻮﯾﺴﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 25
‫▲‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪V‬‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪Y‬‬ ‫‪Z‬‬ ‫‪ß‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﮐﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﮐﺴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﺕ‬ ‫@‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻋﺎﺩی‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﯿﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺒﻼﹰ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳌﺴﯽ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﺯ ﺷﯿﺸﻪ ﺁﺑﺪﯾﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻄﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﯾﺎ ﻏﯿﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﯾﺎ ‪ GPRS‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺑﯿﻨﯿﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﻩ‬ ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮ ‪ FM‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﯾﺖ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MMS‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﻟﻐﻮ ﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﲤﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ‪/‬ﭘﺮﻭژﮐﺘﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﭼﻨﺪﮐﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﻮی‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﻨﺪﮐﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﯾﻒ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩی ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﲤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳌﺴﯽ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﯽ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﯿﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﯾﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﯾﮏ ﺭﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭘﺎک‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﲤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﯿ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﯿﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﯿﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪-‬‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ‪-‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪ -‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮی ”ﺣﯿﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ“‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﯾﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .
PAGE 31
‫ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﯽ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی ﺳﺮﯾﻊ‬ ‫ﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﮑﺮﺭﺍ ﹰ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﯾﺪ ﯾﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی ﺳﺮﯾﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﻭی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪ .
PAGE 32
‫ﲤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪DTMF‬‬ ‫‪ DTMF‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻋﺪﺩی ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﯿﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ DTMF‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ) ﻣﺜﻼﹰ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﯾﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻏﯿﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ DTMF‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺁﻣﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺨﭽﻪ ﺍﺧﯿﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﻝ‬ ‫ی‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯی‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻫﻤﻪ ﲤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﲤﺎﺱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﯾﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﲤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻦ ‪ -‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ‪ -‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﯾﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭ ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ ‪ -‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺑﻮﻕ ﯾﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭ ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﯾﺪ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻪ‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺶ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪ GD900‬ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺒﯽ ﺍﺯ ‪ SMS‬ﻭ ‪ MMS‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻬﻢ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﯾﺎ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﮑﺮﺭﺍ ﹰ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼﹰ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻟﻐﺖ‬ ‫”‪ ،“hello‬ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ‪ 4‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ 3 ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ 5 ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺳﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭ‪ 5 ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﹰ ﺳﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ 6‬ﺭﺍ ﺳﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﯿﺸﮕﻮی ‪ T9‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩی‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺲ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺎﺯﯾﺎﺑﯽ ‪ -‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪ GD900‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ‪ -‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺖ ‪ -‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﯽ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﻣﯿﻨﮓ ‪ -‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﯿﺪ )ﺭﻭﻣﯿﻨﮓ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺶ ﻧﻮﯾﺲ ﻫﺎ ‪ -‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺯﻧﺠﯿﺮﻩ ﺍی ‪ -‬ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ )‪ (SMS‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻤﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻔﺘﮕﻮی‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻦ ‪ -‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ‪ SMS‬ﻭ ‪ MMS‬ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪ .
PAGE 39
‫ﻮی‬ ‫ﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ -‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﭼﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ‪ -‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺑﺮ‪X.400 ،‬‬ ‫ﯾﺎ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪ -‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪ ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻧﯿﺰ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﯾﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ SMS‬ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﯾﺎ ‪ MMS‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﮑ‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺏ ﮐﺸﻮﯾﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ‪ -‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﯾﺎ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ‪ -‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ‪ -‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 40‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ ‪ -‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮏ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﹰ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ‪ -‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺻﻼﹰ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻧﻤﯽ‬ ‫ﺯﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﯿﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﯾﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ‪ -‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﹰ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮏ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 43
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻑ‬ ‫ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﺪﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ‪ LG GD900‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ‪-‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎی‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﯾﺎ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ ‪ -‬ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﯿﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ 3 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ‪5 ،‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﯾﺎ ‪ 10‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﻗﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺣﻀﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ‪ -‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﻋﺎﺩی ﯾﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ISO - ISO‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﯿﺖ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﯿﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 45
‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ ‫ﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺸﺖ‪ .‬ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻏﯿﺮ ﭘﯿﺶ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻤﺘﺮی ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .
PAGE 46
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺑﻌ‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺏ ﮐﺸﻮﯾﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ‪ -‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ‪ -‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 45‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ -‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺯﮔﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﹰ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺗﯿﺮﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺬﮐﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﺪﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﮑﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ‪ -‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ‪ -‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﯽ‬ ‫ﻪ‬ ‫ﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺩی‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪ GD900‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ‪320x240‬‬ ‫ﻭ ‪ 176x144‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﯾﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﯾﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‬ ‫ﯾﺎ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﯾﺎ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻪ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﯾﺎ ﯾﮏ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﯾﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﻮ ﺁﺧﺮﯾﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﯾﺎ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺸﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻃﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺸﯽ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﺮی ﻧﯿﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﯾﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﺪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .
PAGE 53
‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻪ‬ ‫ﺙ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ‪ -‬ﯾﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻭﯾﺠﺖ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﯾﺎ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ -‬ﯾﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ‪ -‬ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻭی ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ‪ -‬ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯿﮑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﯿ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﺎﺯی ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﮏ ﺗﮏ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .
PAGE 55
‫ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺪﻩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻭی ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻓﯿﻠﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ‪ GD900‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ‪ DivX‬ﻭ ‪ Xvid‬ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﻓﻠﺶ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫‪ SWF‬ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯی ﯾﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﯾﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻪ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫‪ MMS‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﮏ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪ LG GD900‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﯾﮏ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .
PAGE 58
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪ LG GD900‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﯾﮏ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮ ‪FM‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﮐﺖ ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ ﯾﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻭ ﯾﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .
PAGE 59
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﯾﺎ‬ ‫ﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﺠﻮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍی‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮ ‪ FM‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻪ ‪ 87.5‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺑﺮﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩی ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻮﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﻗﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻟﮕﺮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﯾﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﯾﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪ :‬ﺯﯾﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻭ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﯾﺎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ‪/‬ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍ ﯾﺎ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺯﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﯾﮏ ﯾﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 63
‫‪ 7‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺻﺪﺍﯾﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﯽ ﯾﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﯽ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﯾﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﯾﺎ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺵ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﯿﺸﮕﯽ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺴﻨﺞ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺴﻨﺞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺴﻨﺞ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﯾﮏ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﯾﺎﺏ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﺩﻧﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﺭﻧﮕﺎﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﺯﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺴﺘﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻟﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﯾﺎﺏ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﯾﺎﺏ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻞ ﯾﺎﺏ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ‪ RSS‬ﺧﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳ‬ ‫‪) RSS‬ﺳﻨﺪﯾﮑﺎی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ( ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﻭﯾﺲ‬ ‫ﺧﺒﺮی ﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺯﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻫﺎی ﻭﺑﻼگ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﯾﺎ ﭘﺎﺩﮐﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﯾﮏ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺪ ‪ RSS‬ﮐﻪ ﺳﺮﻭﯾﺲ ﺧﺒﺮی‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻭﯾﺲ ﺧﺒﺮی‬ ‫ﻭﺏ ﯾﺎ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻧﺎﻣﯿﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭی ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺘﻦ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ RSS .
PAGE 67
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺶ‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫ﯽ‬ ‫ﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪ GD900‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﯿﺰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﯾﻨﮑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻭ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﯾﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪:USB‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ‪ LG PC Suite‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺳﻠﯿﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ GD900‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ‪ -‬ﯾﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی‪ ،‬ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭی ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﺯﺍﺩی ﻋﻤﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪ GD900‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ‪ -‬ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪ -‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ ‪ -‬ﺻﺪﺍی ‪1/2/3‬‬ ‫ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪ -‬ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﯾﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﯾﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﺖ‬ ‫ی‬ ‫ﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ GD900‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ )ﺷﺎﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﯾﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ(‪ .‬ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﯾﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻀﺎی‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﯾﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﹰ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻼﹰ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ GD900‬ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﯿﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ‪ GD900،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﯽ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﯾﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻦ ‪ -‬ﻧﺎﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫‪ GD900‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﯾﺖ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻦ ‪ -‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﯾﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﯾﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﯾﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ -‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﮔﻮﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ‪ BT‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 32‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﮔﻮﯾﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﲤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﯾﺪ‪.
PAGE 75
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﯾﺮ ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﯾﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‪ Wi- Fi .‬ﺳﺮﯾﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻭﺳﯿﻊ ﺗﺮی ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻦ‬ ‫ﺁﻭﺭی ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ GD900 :‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪WEP، WPA-PSK/2‬‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪EAP، WPS‬‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 76
‫ﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪ (2‬ﺑﺎ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﯿﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﯿﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺖ‬ ‫ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﯿﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﺯ ‪ DHCP‬ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪ IP‬ﺍﯾﺴﺘﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﯿﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺷﺮﺡ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪ (1‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‪(SSID (ID :‬‬ ‫‪ (2‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺖ‪ :‬ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ‪WEP،‬‬ ‫‪.PA-PSK/2‬‬ ‫‪ (3‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺘﯽ‪ :‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪LG Mobile‬‬ ‫“ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺯ ‪http://update.‬‬ ‫‪ lgmobile.com‬ﺑﺎﺯﺩﯾﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﺗﺮﯾﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﯾﻨﮑﻪ ﻧﯿﺎﺯی ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‪“.
PAGE 78
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻃ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﯾﺪﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻧﯿﺎﺯﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﯽ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭی ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪0،‬‬ ‫‪00‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺧ‬ ‫ﺍﺷ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻤ‬ ‫ﺳﯿ‬ ‫ﮔﯿ‬ ‫ﻃﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﯽ ﺩی‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ GD900‬ﻭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻤﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫‪E-GSM 900، DCS 1800، GSM 850،‬‬ ‫‪ PCS 1900‬ﻭ ‪ W-CDMA‬ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎ ﹰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻨﻬﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﯾﮋﻩ ﺍی ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺳﯿﻢ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻨﺪ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ‪ .
PAGE 80
‫ﺩﺳ‬ ‫ﻟﻄ‬ ‫ﮐﻨ‬ ‫ﺍﺳ‬ ‫ﻗﻮ‬ ‫ﻗﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻃ‬ ‫ﻭﺿ‬ ‫ﻫﻤ‬ ‫ﺍﺳ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳ‬ ‫ﮔﻮ‬ ‫ﺻﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ‬ ‫• ﺍﮔ‬ R ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍی‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / GSM 850 / PCS 1900 Quad Band and WCDMA Terminal Equipment GD900 R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC EN 301 489-1 V1.6.1 / EN 301 489-7 V1.3.1 / EN 301 489-17 V1.2.1 / EN 301 489-24 V1.3.1 EN 60950-1: 2001 EN 50360 / EN62209-1: 2006 EN 301 511 V9.0.2 / EN 301 908-1 V3.2.1 / EN 301 908-2 V3.2.1 EN 300 328 V1.7.
PAGE 81
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﹰ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﯾﺖ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺿﺮﺭﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻧﻘﺾ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﻧﯿﻦ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻧﺮژی ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺿﺮﯾﺐ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭﯾﮋﻩ )‪ (SAR‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ GD900‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .
PAGE 82
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﲡﻬﯿﺰﺍﺕ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﲡﻬﯿﺰﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻏﯿﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺎﻃﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺁﻓﺮﯾﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﮐﯿﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺗﮑﻨﺴﯿﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻩ‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﻭﺳﺎﯾﻞ ﻧﻮک ﺗﯿﺰ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺰﻧﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺎﯾﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﯾﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻨﺎﮐﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﯿﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﯽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﯾﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮔﻠﺨﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ ﯾﺎ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ ﮔﺮﻣﺴﯿﺮی ﻭ ﺣﺎﺭﻩ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﮐﯿﺴﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻮﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﯿﺰﺍﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﯾﺎ ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻌﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﯾﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﯿﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﯾﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﮔﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﯿﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺧﯿﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﯾﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﺖ‬ ‫ﯽ‬ ‫ﺕ‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﺣﻤﻞ ﯾﺎ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺎﯾﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻠﯿﻪ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﯾﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﯿﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻻﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻮﺍﭘﯿﻤﺎ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﯿﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﯿﻤﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺯﻣﯿﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﺴﺐ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺩﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﯿﺪ‪ .
PAGE 86
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﯾﺎﺩی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﹰ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﯿﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﯾﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺭﺷﯿﺪ ﻭ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻡ ﯾﺎ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﯿﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﻋﯿﺐ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻓﻊ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﺳﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﯿﺢ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﻋﯿﺐ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣﻼﹰ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻤﯿﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻣﺎی ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﯿﺰ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺷﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﯾﺰ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﻭ ﯾﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 89
Some of the contents in this manual may differ from your phone depending on the software of the phone or your service provider.
PAGE 90
C a d co
PAGE 91
Congratulations on your purchase of the advanced and compact GD900 phone by LG, designed to operate with the latest digital mobile communication technology.
PAGE 92
Contents Set up Using call barring ....................................33 Changing the common call setting ..34 Getting to know your phone ............... 8 Changing your video call settings.....34 Open view .................................................10 Installing the SIM and battery ...........11 Contacts .....................................................35 Searching for a contact .........................35 Charging your phone............................13 Adding a new contact .................
PAGE 93
33 34 34 35 35 35 36 36 37 38 38 38 39 39 39 39 40 40 41 42 42 42 43 44 Get creative Camera .......................................................45 Getting to know the viewfinder ........45 Taking a quick photo..............................46 Once you’ve taken the photo .............46 Using the flash ..........................................47 Adjusting the exposure.........................48 Adjusting the zoom ................................48 Taking a continuous shot .....................
PAGE 94
Contents Creating a slide show .............................70 Checking your memory status ...........70 Sounds ........................................................70 Using a sound ...........................................70 Videos .........................................................71 Sending a video clip ...............................71 Games and Applications ......................71 Playing a game .........................................72 Using the options menu ......................
PAGE 95
79 79 79 80 80 81 81 81 82 82 82 83 83 83 84 84 84 85 85 85 86 86 87 Using ISync ................................................87 DivX Converter .........................................88 The web Browser .......................................................89 Accessing the web ..................................89 Adding and accessing bookmarks ....89 Using the RSS reader ..............................90 Accessing a saved page ........................90 Viewing your browser history .............
PAGE 96
Getting to know your phone Power key Turns the phone on/off. Earpiece Proximity Sensor Inner camera End key • Rejects a call. • Press once to return to the home screen. Multi-tasking key Send key Dials a phone number and answers incoming calls. Battery release button WARNING: Putting a heavy object on the phone or sitting on it can damage its LCD and touch screen functionality. Do not cover the protection film on proximity sensor of LCD. It can be caused the malfunction of sensor.
PAGE 97
Handsfree or Stereo earphone connector/ Charger, Data cable (USB cable) TIP: Before connecting the USB cable, wait until the phone has powered up and has registered on the network. Volume keys • When the screen is idle: key tone volume. • During a call: earpiece volume. • When playing a track: controls volume continuously. Camera key • Go to the camera menu directly by pressing and holding the key.
PAGE 98
Open view In 1 SIM card socket Battery cover Flash light 2 Battery Memory card socket Camera lens Battery release button 10 LG GD900 | User Guide
PAGE 99
Installing the SIM and battery 1 Remove the battery cover Use your thumbnail to open the battery release button on the bottom of the phone and lift off the battery cover. WARNING: Do not remove the battery when the phone is switched on, as this may damage the phone. 3 Install the SIM card Slide the SIM card into the SIM card holder. Make sure the gold contact area on the card is facing downwards. To remove the SIM card, gently push it until it clicks. Gently pull it out.
PAGE 100
Installing the SIM and battery C 4 Install the battery Insert the top of the battery into the top edge of the battery compartment first. Ensure that the battery contacts align with the phone’s terminals. Press the bottom of the battery down until it clips into place.
PAGE 101
Charging your phone Slide back the cover of the charger connector on the side of your GD900. Insert the charger and plug it into a mains electricity socket. Your GD900 must be charged until the “Battery full“ message appears on the screen. NOTE: The battery must be fully charged initially to improve battery lifetime. Disregard the first “Battery full” message and keep the phone on charge overnight.
PAGE 102
Memory card Installing a memory card You can expand the available memory space on your phone by using a memory card. NOTE: A memory card is an optional accessory. Slide the memory card into the slot at the top, until it clicks into place. Make sure the gold contact area is facing downwards. WARNING: Slide into the memory card to the slot, otherwise, the card can be damaged.
PAGE 103
Formatting the memory card Transferring your contacts Your memory card may already be formatted. If it isn’t, you will need to format it before you can start to use it. NOTE: All files get deleted while formatting. 1 From the home screen select and choose Phone settings from the Settings tab. 2 Scroll and touch Memory Info then scroll and select External memory. 3 Touch Format and then confirm your choice. 4 Enter the password, if one has been set. The card will then be formatted and ready to use.
PAGE 104
Menu map Y Touch in the home screen to open a Top menu. From here you can access further menus by scrolling through the icons: Communication, Multimedia, Utilities and Settings.
PAGE 105
Your home screen From this screen you can access menu options, make a call, view the status of your phone and much more. • Whenever your GD900 is not in use, it will return to the lock screen. Touch screen tips The home screen is also a great place to get used to using the touch screen. To select an item, touch the centre of the icon. • Do not to press too hard; the touchscreen is sensitive enough to pick up on a light, firm touch. • Use the tip of your finger to touch the option you require.
PAGE 106
Your home screen Customising the home screen 1 Shortcut home screen 2 Widget home screen (active) • Home screen customisation - For each type of home screen you are able to add and remove objects by pressing & holding your finger on the screen, or if already added touching and holding one of the objects.
PAGE 107
Get in touch with your GD900 The User Interface is based on four types of Homescreens. To swap between the home screens just wipe quickly over display from left to right or from right to left. NOTE: Use flicking to navigate without disturbing the display area.
PAGE 108
Your home screen Quick keys To The quick keys on your home screen provide easy, one-touch access to the functions you use the most. Th sc de ca O To to Touch to bring up the touch dialling pad, which lets you make a call. Enter the number using the normal key pad and touch Voice call . or tap To make a video call to this number, touch Video Call after entering the number. Touch to open your contacts. To search for the number you want to call: Enter the name of the contact using the touchpad.
PAGE 109
e . Touch screen The controls on the GD900 touch screen change dynamically, depending on the task you are carrying out. Opening Applications To open any Application, simply touch its icon. Scrolling Drag from side to side to scroll. On some screens, such as web pages, you can also scroll up or down.
PAGE 110
Your home screen Zooming In or Out When viewing photos, web pages, emails, or maps, you can zoom in and out. Pinch your fingers together or slide them apart.
PAGE 111
Transparent Touchpad Make the most of your Transparent Touchpad. 1 Touchpad Shortcut : You can assign a symbol for the most commonly used menus. Assign a symbol to each shortcut, so you can instantly access your favourite functions with simple finger gestures. For example, if you draw on the Transparent Touchpad, it will instantly go to Email. 2 Easy click : You can click on the Transparent Touchpad without covering the main screen while using the Web Browser.
PAGE 112
Your home screen 3 Touch wheel: Adjust the volume or brightness by drawing and on the Transparent Touchpad in Music, Divx Playback, Camera and Video Camera. You can also zoom in or zoom out by drawing or on the Transparent Touchpad in Camera mode, and Video Camera mode. (ABC), letters you type will be inserted as capital letters even if you write in small letters, and vice . versa. Touch ▲ and Touch You can write on the screen with your finger.
PAGE 113
f ce h Letter Q Strokes Mark R S U Numbers V W X Y Z ß Accented characters Space Backspace Strokes Full stop At @ T Accent Punctuation marks Strokes Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Strokes Enter 25
PAGE 114
Your home screen 5 Normal Keypad : The Transparent Touchpad can also be used to input numbers and text in a familiar way. Note The Transparent Touchpad is made of Tempered Glass. Viewing the status bar 6 Favourites : Display your favourite contacts, songs and photos on . the screen by touching The status bar uses different icons to show conditions such as signal strength, new messages and battery life as well as whether Bluetooth or data connections is active.
PAGE 115
ry r ee Icon Description Bluetooth Stereo headset Icon Description Multi-tasking Bluetooth Mono headset Music paused Bluetooth on Music playing Bluetooth Transfer FM radio playing Bluetooth Visibility Email being sent Downloading Email receiving Downloading complete. MMS Downloading cancelled.
PAGE 116
Your home screen C Icon Description External memory T k p m Battery status Projector/TV out Using the Multi - tasking function Touch the multitasking hard key to open the Multitasking menu. From here you can view some applications that are running and access them with one touch.
PAGE 117
Calls TIP! Press the power key to lock the touchscreen to prevent calls being made by mistake. Making a call or a video call 1 Touch to open the keypad. 2 Type in the number on the keypad. To delete a digit, press the clear key. 3 Touch the key to make the call. 4 To end the call, touch the key. TIP! To enter + in order to make international calls, touch twice, or press and hold down . Calling your contacts 1 From the home screen touch to open your Contacts.
PAGE 118
Calls In-call options A Speaker - Touch on. Contacts Memo to turn the speaker phone Mute - Touch to turn the microphone off so the person you are talking to cannot hear you. Sp Hold - Touch Yo co 1 to put a call on hold. Options - Choose from a list of further in-call options, including creating new memo and going to messages, so you can check your messages and add contacts during a call. You can also end the call from here by touching End call.
PAGE 119
Adjusting call volume To adjust the volume during a call, use the up and down button on the right side of the phone. Speed dialling g You can assign a frequently-called contact to a speed dial number. 1 From the home screen touch to open your Contacts. 2 Touch and select Speed dials. 3 Your voicemail is already set to speed dial 1. You cannot change this. Touch any other number to assign it to a speed dial contact. 4 Your contacts list will open.
PAGE 120
Calls NOTE: You will be charged for each call you make. Turning off DTMF DTMF lets you use numerical commands to navigate within automated calls. DTMF default is set to on. To turn it off during a call (to make and a note of a number) touch select Disable DTMF. Viewing your call logs From the home screen, touch , then touch Recent history in 32 LG GD900 | User Guide the Communication tab.
PAGE 121
d t s. Using call divert and choose Call 1 Touch settings in the Settings tab. 2 Touch Call divert and select Voice calls and/or Video calls. 3 Choose whether to divert all call, when the line is busy, when there is no answer or when you cannot be contacted. 4 Touch Activate to activate. 5 Enter the number to divert to. NOTE: Diverting calls will incur charges. Please contact your network operator for details. TIP! To turn off all call diverts, choose Deactivate all from the Call divert menu.
PAGE 122
Calls Changing the common call setting 1 Touch and choose Call settings in the Settings tab. 2 Touch Common settings. This lets you change the following settings: Call reject - Slide the switch left for ON. You can touch the Reject list to choose all calls, specific contacts or groups or calls from unregistered numbers (i.e. not in your contacts) or No caller ID. Send my number - Choose whether to display your number on an outgoing call. Auto redial - Slide the switch left for ON or right for OFF.
PAGE 123
et or e o g Contacts Searching for a contact Adding a new contact There are two ways to search for a contact: From the home screen 1 From the home screen, touch to open your Contacts. Touch and enter the contact name using the key pad. 2 Touch Video call or Voice call or the key to place the call. 1 From the home screen, touch and then touch then select New contact button. 2 Choose whether to save the contact to Handset or USIM. 3 If you want to add a picture to the new contact, touch Add picture.
PAGE 124
Contacts 8 You can also add a Ringtone, Homepage, Home address, Company name, Job title, Company address, Birthday, Anniversary and a Memo. to save the contact. 9 Touch TIP! You can create customised groups for your contacts. See Creating a group. Creating a group 1 From the home screen, touch and then touch Contacts in the Communication tab. 2 Touch Contacts on the top of the screen then touch Groups and select new group. 3 Enter a name for the new group. 4 Touch to save the group.
PAGE 125
gs r of e Move all - This works in the same way as Copy, but the contact is stored at the new location only. Therefore, once a contact is moved from the SIM to the handset it will be deleted from the SIM memory. Clear contacts - Delete all your contacts. Touch Yes if you are sure you want to delete all your contacts. Memory info - View memory capacity information. TIP! To add your own business card, select My business card and enter your details as you would for any contact. Touch Save icon to finish.
PAGE 126
Messaging Messaging Your GD900 combines SMS, MMS into one intuitive, easy-to-use menu. There are two ways of entering the messaging centre: 1 From the home screen, touch , then scroll to Messaging or on the Communication tab. Sending a message 1 Touch then Write message to open a blank message. 2 Touch To to enter the recipient’s number, or open your contacts or favourites. You can add multiple contacts. When you are finished, touch the message box below to start composing the message text.
PAGE 127
s, w Entering text and 3 to write ‘telephone’. Keypad. Abc manual Touch to turn on T9 predictive texting. Touch to change the writing language. Tap to change between the number, symbol and text keypads. In Abc mode you have to touch the key repeatedly to enter a letter. For example, to write ‘hello’, touch 4 twice, 3 twice, 5 three times, 5 three more times, then 6 three times. Use to scroll through the different keyboards in each text entry mode (e.g. capital or lower case letters). .
PAGE 128
Messaging 1 Touch from the home screen, and scroll to Email on the Communication tab. 2 Touch Write email. If the email account is not set up, start the email set up wizard. TIP! If an email account is already set up, the wizard is not activated automatically. Sending an email using your new account 1 Touch from the home screen, and scroll to Email on the Communication tab to open a new blank message. 2 Enter the recipient’s address and write your message.
PAGE 129
s s n, s nt. Retrieve interval - Select how often your GD900 checks for new email messages. Include message in Fwd & Reply- Select to include the original message in any reply. Include attachment - Select to include the original attachment in any reply. Auto retrieval when Roaming Choose whether to retrieve messages automatically when abroad (roaming). New email noti. info - Choose whether to be alerted about a new e-mail with a pop-up message.
PAGE 130
Messaging Drafts - If you don’t finish writing a message, you can save what you’ve done in this folder. Threaded box - Messages (SMS) exchanged with another party can be displayed in chronological order so that you can conveniently see an overview of your conversation. My Folders - Create folders to store your messages. Using templates Create templates for the SMS and MMS messages you send most often. There are already some templates on the phone, which you can edit.
PAGE 131
y y e Text message centre - Enter the details of your message centre. Delivery report - Slide the switch left to receive confirmation that your messages have been delivered. Validity period - Choose how long your messages are stored at the message centre. Message types - Convert your text into Voice, Fax, X.400 or Email. Character encoding - Choose how your characters are encoded. This affects the size of your messages and therefore your data charges.
PAGE 132
Messaging Read reply - Choose whether to allow and/or send a read reply. Priority - Choose the priority level of your MMS. Validity period - Choose how long your message is stored at the message centre. Slide duration - Choose how long slides appear on screen. Creation mode - Restricted/ Warning/ Free Delivery time - Choose how long to wait before a message is delivered. Multimedia message centre - Enter the details of your message centre.
PAGE 133
s Camera Getting to know the viewfinder Open the slide to use the Outer Camera. Back - Touch here to return to the menu map. e. Camera mode - Shows whether the camera is in video or photo mode, and can also be used to take photos. e e e Gallery - Touch this icon to view the gallery. Exposure - See Adjusting the Exposure on page 48. Macro - Switch this on to take close up shots. Flash status - Set flash light mode to Auto, Always off or Always on. Settings - Touch this icon to open the settings menu.
PAGE 134
Camera Taking a quick photo Once you’ve taken the photo In 1 Press and hold down the camera key on the right side of the phone. 2 Holding the phone horizontally, point the lens towards the subject you want to take a picture of. 3 Press the capture button lightly and a focus box will appear in the centre of the viewfinder screen. 4 Position the phone so you can see the photo subject in the focus box. 5 When the focus box turns green, the camera has focused on your subject.
PAGE 135
o - r a Incoming call image. Using the flash Touch to edit the name of the selected picture. The default flash setting is auto, but there are other options. 1 Select from the left side of the viewfinder to enter the flash sub-menu. 2 There are three flash options: Auto - Your camera will assess the light available for a good picture and use the flash as necessary. Always off - The camera will never flash. This is useful if you want to save battery power. Always on - The camera will always flash.
PAGE 136
Camera Adjusting the exposure Ta The exposure defines the difference between light and dark areas in an image. A low contrast image will appear foggy, whereas a high contrast image will appear much sharper. 1 Touch . 2 Slide the contrast indicator along the bar towards for a lower exposure and hazier image or for a higher exposure towards and a sharper image. Or make a clockwise touch wheel on the Transparent Touchpad for higher exposure and an anti-clockwise one for lower exposure.
PAGE 137
Taking a continuous shot 1 From the viewfinder, touch to open all advanced settings options and select Shot mode and Continuous shot. 2 Position the subject in the viewfinder and press the capture button as if taking a normal photo. 3 The camera will take shots in quick succession. Using the advanced settings From the viewfinder, touch to open all advanced settings options. You can change the camera setting by scrolling the wheel. After selecting the option, touch the OK button.
PAGE 138
Camera ISO - The ISO rating determines the sensitivity of the camera’s light sensor. The higher the ISO, the more sensitive the camera will be. This is useful in darker conditions when you can not use the flash. Select the ISO value from Auto, 100, 200, 400, 800 and 1600. Auto focus - Select the way the camera will focus. Choose between Spot, Manual and Face tracking. Image quality - Choose between Super fine, Fine and Normal. The finer the quality, the sharper the photo.
PAGE 139
n TIP! The settings menu is superimposed over the viewfinder, so when you change elements of the image colour or quality you will see a preview of the image change behind the settings menu. Choosing a colour effect Changing the image size The more pixels, the larger the file, which means the files take up more memory space. If you want to store more pictures on your phone, you can change the resolution to make the files smaller. 1 Using the viewfinder, touch in the top left corner.
PAGE 140
Camera TIP! You can change a picture taken in colour to black and white or sepia, but you cannot change a picture taken in black and white or sepia to colour. Using the inner camera Your LG GD900 has an inner 640x480 camera for both video calls and taking photos. 1 To switch to the inner camera then select Swap touch camera and select Secondary. 2 After a few seconds you’ll see yourself in the viewfinder. To capture the image, press the side button as normal.
PAGE 141
os Video camera Getting to know the viewfinder Open the slide to use the Outer Camera. Back - Touch here to return to the home screen. Start recording Gallery - Touch this icon to view the gallery. Exposure - See Adjusting the Exposure on page 55. Recording speed Flash status - Set or turn off the flash. Settings - Touch this icon to open the settings menu. See Using the advanced settings on page 55 for details. TIP! You can close all shortcut options to give a clearer viewfinder screen.
PAGE 142
Video camera Shooting a quick video After shooting a video 1 Press and hold down the camera key on the right side of the phone. . Or, you 2 Then, switch to can enter this menu directly by touching Video camera. 3 The video camera’s viewfinder will appear on the screen. 4 Holding the phone horizontally, point the lens towards the subject of the video. 5 Press the capture button once to start recording. 6 Rec will appear at the bottom of the viewfinder with a timer showing the length of the video.
PAGE 143
Use Touch to use the video as Ringtone or video call ringtone. n, Rename Touch to edit the name of the selected Video. Touch to return to the previous menu. Touch to delete the video you have just made, and confirm by touching Yes. The viewfinder will reappear. Touch to shoot another video immediately. Your current video will be saved. s Touch to view the saved videos and pictures gallery. Adjusting the exposure g The exposure defines the difference between light and dark areas in an image.
PAGE 144
Video camera Changing the video image size on page 57. Scene mode - Choose between Auto or Night mode. Colour effect - Choose a colour tone to use on your new view. See Choosing a colour tone on page 58. White balance - The white balance ensures any white parts of your video are realistic. To enable your camera to adjust the white balance correctly, you may need to determine the light conditions. Choose between Auto, Incandescent, Sunny, Fluorescent or Cloudy.
PAGE 145
y. u Changing the video image size The more pixels, the larger the file size, which means the files take up more memory space. If you want to store more videos on your phone, you can change the video resolution to make the files smaller. 1 Using the viewfinder, touch in the top left corner. 2 Select Video size from the Preview menu. 3 Select a pixel value from the four options: 720X480(D1) - The highest quality, widescreen option. 640x480 - Standard sized VGA.
PAGE 146
Video camera Choosing a colour tone 1 Using the viewfinder, touch in the top left corner. 2 Select Colour effect from the Preview menu. 3 There are six colour tone options, Off, Sepia, Mono, Negative or Emboss. 4 Touch the colour tone you want to use. TIP! You can change a video shot in colour to black and white or sepia, but you cannot change a video shot in black and white or sepia to colour. Using the inner video camera Your LG GD900 has an inner 320x240 camera for both video calls and recording videos.
PAGE 147
rt Watching your saved videos 1 In the viewfinder, touch . 2 Your gallery will appear on the screen. 3 Touch a video once to bring it to the front of the gallery. It start to play automatically. Watching your videos on TV Connect your GD900 to your TV using the TV output cable. NOTE: The TV output cable is available for purchase separately. TIP! All formats except 320x240 and 176x144 are compatible with playing the video through a TV.
PAGE 148
Your photos and videos Viewing your photos and videos Using zoom when viewing a video or photo 1 Touch on the camera preview screen. 2 Your gallery will appear on the screen. 3 Touch the video or photo to open it fully. When viewing photos or videos, you can zoom in and out by pinching your fingers together or spreading them apart.
PAGE 149
ou me r t t the picture using a thumbnail at the bottom of the screen. Editing your photos You can do lots of great things to your photos to change them, add to them or liven them up. 1 Open the photo you want to edit and touch Edit to show the options. 2 Touch the icons to alter your photo: Crop your photo. Choose a square or circular crop area and move your finger across the screen to select the area. Draw something on your photo, freehand.
PAGE 150
Your photos and videos 4 Filter Touch to apply the effect options to a photo. Text Adjust ment No box This helps to adjust a picture taken using automatic colour, brightness etc. Box colour Text color Save Undo Image Filter A p 1 Adjust mant Save Adding an effect to a photo Undo 1 From the editing screen, touch Filter . 2 You can apply any of the various options to the photo 3 To undo an effect simply touch Undo .
PAGE 151
4 When you are finished with your selection, touch Save . ve do ge er ust nt s Adding a colour accent to a photo 1 From the editing screen, touch Image . 2 Choose Colour Accent. 3 Select part of the photo. A traced line will appear around everything in that area which is the same or a similar colour, for example, a person’s hair or jumper. 4 Alter the intensity of the accenting by touching Intensity and touch ‘+’ or ‘-’ button. 5 Touch OK.
PAGE 152
Your photos and videos Trimming the length of the video 7 Merging two videos 1 Open the video you want to edit, option key. touch 2 Select Edit and choose Trim/ Multi trim. 3 Touch and set the new start and end points using Trim . 4 Touch Preview to confirm you are satisfied with the new cut. 5 Touch Save or, alternatively, to return to the touch gallery and discard the changes. 1 Open the video you want to edit, option key. touch 2 Select Edit and choose Video merge. 3 The My videos folder will open.
PAGE 153
, o ve ct ew e w 7 Repeat these steps to merge more videos. Merging a photo with a video 1 Open the video you want to edit, option key. touch 2 Select Edit and choose Image merge. 3 The My images folder will open. Choose the photo you want to move into your video and touch Select. 4 Touch and slide the photo to merge it to the end or the beginning of the video. 5 Touch Preview to choose how the photo and video merge together.
PAGE 154
Your photos and videos 7 Repeat these steps to add more text. 8 Repeat these steps to add more photos. A vi Overlaying a photo Adding a soundtrack to your video 1 1 Open the video you want to edit, option key. touch 2 Select Edit and choose Image overlay. 3 The My images folder will open. Choose the photo you want to overlay on your video. 4 Touch and pause when you want the picture to appear, then select Opacity after touching the Start button.
PAGE 155
r , o Adding live sound to your video Changing the video speed 1 Open the video you want to edit, option key. touch 2 Select Edit and choose Live dubbling. 3 Set the sound value to original sound or recording sound. dd Reset Audio mixing ratio Save Adding a dimming effect Undo Original sound Recording sound 1 Open the video you want to edit, option key. touch 2 Select Edit and choose Time scaling. 3 Select one of the options. This can vary depending on the frame rate.
PAGE 156
Multimedia You can store multimedia files in your phone’s memory so you have easy access to all your pictures, sounds, videos and games. You can also save your files to a memory card. Using a memory card allows you to free up space in your phone’s memory. To access the Multimedia menu, select My stuff from touch Multimedia tab. You can open a list of the folders that store all your multimedia files. TIP! To delete any files in then Delete.
PAGE 157
es , ult l, o Using an image You can choose images to use as wallpapers and screensavers, or even to identify a caller. then select My stuff 1 Touch from Multimedia tab. 2 Touch My images. 3 Select an image and touch . 4 Touch Use as and choose between: Homescreens - Set a wallpaper for All homescreens, Widget, Contacts, Multimedia or Shortcut. Lock screen - Set a wallpaper for the key lock screen.
PAGE 158
Multimedia Moving or copying an image Checking your memory status An image can be moved or copied between the phone memory and the memory card. You may want to do this to clear some space in one of the memories, or to safeguard your images against loss. 1 Touch then select My stuff from Multimedia tab. 2 Touch My images. 3 Touch . 4 Select Move or Copy. You can check to see how much memory space you have used and how much you have left. 1 Touch then select My stuff from Multimedia tab. 2 Touch My images.
PAGE 159
us d 4 Select a sound and touch the play icon. It will start to play. 5 You can use the sound for various tones by selecting the Use as menu. 6 Choose between Voice ringtone, Video ringtone and Message tone. Videos The My videos folder shows a list of videos you have downloaded or recorded on your phone. Watching a video then select My stuff 1 Touch on the Multimedia tab. 2 Touch My videos. 3 Select a video to play.
PAGE 160
Multimedia Playing a game 1 Touch then select Games & Apps on the Multimedia tab. 2 Touch Games or Applications menu. 3 Touch Launch button to launch a game or an application. Using the options menu Within Games and Application folders, the following options are available: • New folder: Create a folder within Games or Applications • Sort by: Sort the games and applications by Date, Name, Size or Memory • Memory info: View the memory status handset or external memory. • Folder info.
PAGE 161
. d Documents This is possible with your Excel, PowerPoint, Word, Text and pdf files. Viewing a file 1 Touch then select My stuff from Multimedia tab. 2 Touch Documents. 3 Select a document and touch View. Transferring a file to your phone Bluetooth is probably the easiest way of transferring a file from your computer to your phone. You can also use LG PC Suite via your sync cable, see page 84 for details. To transfer files (e.g.
PAGE 162
Multimedia 4 Touch the Sound tab on the screen to change the sound, e.g. for a voice recording. 5 Touch the Preview button to see the results. 6 Touch the Play Order tab on the screen to change the order. 7 Touch the Saved in tab on the screen to choose where to save the movie, and touch the Usage tab to choose between storing it and MMS. 8 To save your movie touch Save movie. Music Your LG GD900 has a built-in music player that lets you play all your favourite tracks.
PAGE 163
c c ic s: u Transferring music onto your phone The easiest way to transfer music onto your phone is via Bluetooth or the data cable. You can also use LG PC Suite, see page 84 for details. To transfer music using Bluetooth: 1 Make sure both devices have Bluetooth switched on and are connected to each other. 2 Select the music file on the other device and select send via Bluetooth. 3 When the file is sent, you will have to accept it on your phone by touching Yes.
PAGE 164
Multimedia Creating a playlist Deleting a playlist You can create your own playlists by choosing a selection of songs from the All tracks folder. 1 Touch then select Music from the Multimedia tab. 2 Touch the option icon. 3 Touch New playlist, enter the playlist name and touch . 4 The All tracks folder will be displayed. Touch all of the songs that you would like to include in your playlist; a tick will appear next to these track names. 5 Touch Add songs. To play a playlist, select it and touch Play.
PAGE 165
FM Radio Set as channel Listen via Volume Resetting channels n r 3 Touch Auto scan then Yes. The stations found will be allocated to channel numbers in your phone by selecting Set, Skip and Stop. NOTE: You can also manually tune to a station by using the wheel displayed next to the radio frequency. Searching for stations You can tune your phone to radio stations by searching for them manually or automatically. They will then be saved to specific channel numbers, so you don’t have to keep re-tuning.
PAGE 166
Multimedia O Listening to the radio A ca 1 Touch then select FM radio from Multimedia tab. 2 Touch the channel number of the station you would like to listen to. TIP! To improve radio reception, extend the headset cord, which functions as the radio aerial. Warning! If you connect the headset not specifically made for it to the phone, the radio reception can be interfered.
PAGE 167
Organiser Adding an event to your calendar 1 From the home screen select then scroll to Organiser on the Utilities tab. 2 Select the date to which you want to add an event. then New schedule. 3 Touch 4 Touch Category then choose between Appointment, Anniversary or Birthday. Check the date and enter the time you want your event to begin. 5 For appointments and anniversaries, you can enter the time and date the event finishes in the lower time and date boxes.
PAGE 168
Organiser Adding an item to your To Do list 1 From the home screen select then scroll to Organiser on the Utilities tab. select New task and 2 Select touch Note. 3 Set the date for the task, add notes, then select its priority level: High, Medium or Low. . 4 Save the task by selecting TIP! You can back up and synchronise your calendar with your computer. See PC Sync on page 84.
PAGE 169
e m Setting your alarm Adding a memo 1 From the home screen select then scroll to Alarms on the Utilities tab. 2 If you want add a new alarm, touch New alarm. If you want to set the alarm to sound again within one hour, touch Quick alarm. 3 Set the time you would like the alarm to sound. 4 Choose whether you want the alarm to repeat, set the repeat and type. The icons indicate the weekday you select. 5 Select Sound/ Vibration to select the type of alarm you want.
PAGE 170
Organiser Recording a sound or voice Sending the voice recording 1 Touch . 2 Touch Voice recorder in Utilities tap. 3 Choose where to save the recording between Handset and External. 4 Choose recording mode between General and MMS. 5 Touch Rec. to begin recording. 6 Touch Stop to end recording. 1 Once you have finished recording, you can send the audio clip by touching Send. 2 Choose Message, Email or Bluetooth.
PAGE 171
g n he ÷), 4 For more complex calculations, touch and choose between sin, cos, tan, deg, log, etc.. Converting a unit 1 From the home screen select , then scroll to Tools on the Utilities tab. 2 Select Unit converter. 3 Choose whether you want to convert Currency, Area, Length, Weight, Temperature, Volume or Velocity. 4 Then select the unit and enter the value you would like to convert from. 5 The corresponding values then will appear on the screen.
PAGE 172
PC Suite You can synchronise your PC with your phone. This will ensure all your important details and dates match, and also act as a back up to help your mind at ease. Caution! If installation guide message is not displayed in your PC, please check your CD-ROM setting on Windows. 3 TIP! To do this, you will need to install the PC Suite application provided on the CD-ROM or available as a download from http://update.lgmobile. com. (From www.lgmobile.
PAGE 173
r n. 3 Your phone and PC are now connected. Backing up and restoring your phone‘s information 1 Connect your phone to your PC as outlined above. 2 Click on the Backup icon, and select Backup or Restore. 3 Choose whether to back up Contents Data and/or Phonebook/Schedule/Todo/ Memo Data. Select the location you want to back up the information to, or restore it from. Click OK. 4 Your information will be backed up. y Viewing phone files on your PC 1 Connect your phone to your PC as outlined above.
PAGE 174
PC Suite your contacts and choose Select all, then Copy or Move to phone memory. Right-click your contacts and select Copy to contact. Now click on the Handset folder on the left side of the screen and all your numbers will be displayed. Synchronising your messages 1 Connect the phone to your PC. 2 Click on the Messages icon. 3 All your PC and phone messages will be displayed in folders on the screen. 4 Use the tool bar at the top of your screen to edit and rearrange messages.
PAGE 175
ll . e m 6. Install Windows Media Player version 11(WMP 11). 7. When WMP is successfully installed, connect the mobile phone to your PC. Transferring music using Windows Media Player 1 From the home screen select , then scroll to Connectivity on the Settings tab. 2 Select USB connection mode and choose Music sync. 3 Connect your handset and PC using a compatible USB cable. 4 When you try to connect the handset to your PC, your handset will read: Music Sync... followed by Connected.
PAGE 176
PC Suite NOTE: When using Bluetooth, you have to select ISync on in option menu. TIP! To install the iSync menu in Macintosh PC, please visit the website www.lgmobile.com and download the plug-in for iSync. DivX Converter 88 Install the DivX converter, which is supplied on the same CD as the PC Sync software. DivX will convert media files on your PC to a format that lets you upload them and view them on your phone.
PAGE 177
re x. e e The web Browser Browser gives you a fast, full-colour world of games, music, news, sport, entertainment and loads more, straight to your mobile phone. Wherever you are and whatever you’re into. Accessing the web 1 From the home screen select then scroll to Browser on the Communication tab. 2 To go straight to the browser home page, select Home. Alternatively, select Enter address and type in the URL. NOTE: You will incur extra cost by connecting to these services and downloading content.
PAGE 178
The web Using the RSS reader Accessing a saved page RSS (Really Simple Syndication) is a family of web feed formats used to publish frequently updated content, such as blog entries, news headlines or podcasts. An RSS document, called a feed, web feed or channel, contains either a summary of content from an associated website or its full text. RSS makes it possible for people to keep up-to-date with their favourite web sites in an automated way that is easier than checking manually.
PAGE 179
w y e Changing web browser settings 1 From the home screen select then scroll to Connectivity on the Settings tab. 2 Select Browser settings. 3 You can edit the Profiles, Appearance settings, Cache/ Cookies, Security or Reset settings. 4 You can simply set these on or off by touching the switch icon. Using your phone as a modem Your GD900 can be used as a modem for your PC, giving you email and internet access even when you don’t have any wired connection.
PAGE 180
The web Using Bluetooth: 1 Ensure Bluetooth is switched On and Visible for both your PC and GD900. 2 Pair your PC and GD900 so that a passcode is required to connect them. 3 Use the Connection wizard on your LG PC Suite to create an active Bluetooth connection. 4 click Inernetkit on your PCsuite. Then click New and select Modem. 5 Click Modem. 6 Choose Standard Modem over Bluetooth link and click OK. It will now appear on the screen. 7 Click Connect and your PC will connect via your GD900.
PAGE 181
n. ur Settings This folder lets you adapt your settings to personalise your GD900. NOTE: For information on call settings see page 34. Changing your screen settings 1 From the home screen, select then scroll to Screen settings on the Settings tab. 2 You can choose the option menu from: Wallpaper - Choose an image for Home screen, locking, switching the phone on or off, or making or receiving a call. NOTE: The setting will be reset if you select Reset menu.
PAGE 182
Settings 2 Choose the profile you want to edit: Normal, Silent, Outdoor or Flight mode. 3 You can then change all sounds and alert options available in the list, including your Voice/Video ringtone, Volume, Message alerts and others. Changing your phone settings Use the freedom of adapting the GD900 to your own preferences. 1 From the home screen, select then scroll to Phone settings on the Settings tab.
PAGE 183
ay. d Changing your touch settings From the home screen select From the home screen select then scroll to Phone settings on Settings tab. Choose Touch settings. Touch vibration - Change the vibration On/Off. Vibration type - Vibration 1/2/3 Vibration volume - Controls the strength of vibration. Touch sound - Change the tone when touching the screen. Sound - Sound 1/2/3 Volume - Controls the volume of tone.
PAGE 184
Settings vod.divx.com to register and for technical support. Packet data conn. - Set the packet data connection. Browser setting - Set the values related to the browser. Streaming settings - Your network operator has already saved this information. You can edit it if you want to make changes. Java settings - Allows you to set profiles for connections made by Java programs and to view certificates.
PAGE 185
s, y Using flight mode Turn flight mode on by selecting then Settings. Touch Profiles and select Flight mode. Flight mode prevents you making calls, connecting to the Internet, sending messages or using Bluetooth. Sending and receiving files using Bluetooth Bluetooth is a great way to send and receive files as it uses no wires and connection is quick and easy. You can also connect to a Bluetooth headset to make and receive calls.
PAGE 186
Settings To receive a file: 1 To receive files your Bluetooth must be set to On. See Changing your Bluetooth settings below for more information. 2 A message will prompt you to accept the file from the sender. Touch Yes to receive the file. 3 You will see where the file has been saved and choose to View the file or Use as. Files will usually be saved to the appropriate folder in My stuff.
PAGE 187
a r e ns Pairing with another Bluetooth device By pairing your GD900 with another device, you can set up a passcodeprotected connection. This makes pairing more secure. 1 Check that your Bluetooth is On. You can change your visibility using the Settings menu. 2 Touch New Device. 3 Your GD900 will search for Bluetooth devices. When the search is completed Refresh will appear on the screen. 4 Choose the device you want to pair with and enter a passcode, then touch OK.
PAGE 188
Wi-Fi Wireless Manager allows you to manage Internet connections per Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) on your device. It allows the phone to connect to local wireless networks, or access the Internet wirelessly. Wi-Fi is faster and has a greater range than Bluetooth wireless technology and can be used for fast emailing and Internet browsing. NOTE: The GD900 supports WEP, WPA-PSK/2 encryption, and not EAP, WPS encryption.
PAGE 189
b P 2) Saving the frequently-used AP as a profile makes it easier to enter the Security key when connecting to an AP with that Security type. 3) If the AP does not support DHCP, you can connect to the AP using a static IP address. 2 Description of each field in the Wi-Fi profile. 1) Network name: SSID (ID) 2) Security type: WEP, WPA-PSK/2 support. 3) Security key: saves the security key. 4) IP/DNS setting: this allows you to set to Automatic or Static depending on whether the AP supports DHCP.
PAGE 190
Software Update Software Update LG Mobile Phone Software Update Program For more information on installing and using this program, please visit http://update.lgmobile.com. This feature allows you to update your software to the latest version quickly and conveniently over the Internet without needing to visit our service centre.
PAGE 191
e Accessories There are a variety of accessories available for your mobile phone, which may be sold separately. You can select these options according to your personal communication requirements. Consult your local dealer for availability. (Items described below may be optional.) Charger Battery Stereo headset Data cable and CD Connect and synchronise your GD900 and PC. User Guide Learn more about your GD900. GD900 User Guide NOTE: • Always use genuine LG accessories.
PAGE 192
Network service Technical data The wireless phone described in this guide is approved for use on E-GSM 900, DCS 1800, GSM 850, PCS 1900 and W-CDMA networks. A number of features included in this guide are called Network Services. These are special services that you arrange through your wireless service provider. Before you can take advantage of any of these Network Services, you must subscribe to them through your service provider and obtain instructions for their use from your service provider.
PAGE 193
E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / GSM 850 / PCS 1900 Quad Band and WCDMA Terminal Equipment GD900 R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC EN 301 489-1 V1.6.1 / EN 301 489-7 V1.3.1 / EN 301 489-17 V1.2.1 / EN 301 489-24 V1.3.1 EN 60950-1: 2001 EN 50360 / EN62209-1: 2006 EN 301 511 V9.0.2 / EN 301 908-1 V3.2.1 / EN 301 908-2 V3.2.1 EN 300 328 V1.7.
PAGE 194
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Please read these simple guidelines. Not following these guidelines may be dangerous or illegal. Exposure to radio frequency energy Radio wave exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) information This mobile phone model GD900 has been designed to comply with applicable safety requirements for exposure to radio waves.
PAGE 195
n r rs d Product care and maintenance WARNING Only use batteries, chargers and accessories approved for use with this particular phone model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be dangerous. • Do not disassemble this unit. Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required. • Keep away from electrical appliances such as TVs, radios, and personal computers.
PAGE 196
Guidelines for safe and efficient use • Do not subject this unit to excessive smoke or dust. • Do not keep the phone next to credit cards or transport tickets; it can affect the information on the magnetic strips. • Do not tap the screen with a sharp object as it may damage the phone. • Do not expose the phone to liquid or moisture. • Use the accessories like earphones cautiously. Do not touch the antenna unnecessarily.
PAGE 197
, • Use a hands-free kit, if available. • Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. • RF energy may affect some electronic systems in your vehicle such as car stereos and safety equipment. • When your vehicle is equipped with an air bag, do not obstruct with installed or portable wireless equipment. It can cause the air bag to fail or cause serious injury due to improper performance.
PAGE 198
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Blasting area Children Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress. Observe restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules. Keep the phone in a safe place out of the reach of small children. It includes small parts which may cause a choking hazard if detached. Potentially explosive atmospheres Emergency calls • Do not use the phone at a refueling point. • Do not use near fuel or chemicals.
PAGE 199
d. s. nd y e • Do not disassemble or short-circuit the battery pack. • Keep the metal contacts of the battery pack clean. • Replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance. The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds of times until it needs replacing. • Recharge the battery if it has not been used for a long time to maximize usability. • Do not expose the battery charger to direct sunlight or use it in high humidity, such as in the bathroom.
PAGE 200
Trouble Shooting This chapter lists some problems you might encounter while using your phone. Some problems require you to call your service provider, but most are easy for you to correct yourself. M Message Possible causes Possible Solutions SIM error There is no SIM card in the phone or it is inserted incorrectly. Make sure the SIM card is correctly inserted. No network connection Signal weak Outside GSM network area Move towards a window or into an open area.
PAGE 201
Message Possible causes Possible Solutions Battery totally empty Charge battery. Temperature out of range Make sure the ambient temperature is right, wait for a while, and then charge again. Contact problem Check the power supply and connection to the phone. Check the battery contacts and clean them if necessary. No mains voltage Plug in to a different socket or check the voltage. Charger defective If the charger does not warm up, replace it. Wrong charger Only use original LG accessories.
PAGE 202